2006 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Front Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
If your vehicle has power seats, the controls are located
on the outboard side of the front seat cushions.
Your vehicle may have a manual passenger seat.
To adjust the seat, lift the bar under the front of the seat
to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and
release the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth with
your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down to
raise or lower the front part of the cushion.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have
this feature. The driver’s
and passenger’s seatback
lumbar support can be
adjusted by moving
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down to
raise or lower the rear part of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
control to move the seat cushion up or down.
the control located on
the outboard side of the
seat cushions.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
The vertical control is used for reclining your seatback.
information.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so
should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the
seat as needed.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn on the heated seats, press the button once.
The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the button
again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing the button
a third time turns the system off.
Heated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped
with heated front seats, the
buttons are located on
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. When the vehicle is turned off, the heated
seats automatically turn off. If you wish to have the
heated seats on once the vehicle is restarted, press
the button again.
the climate control panel.
There is one button for the driver and one for the front
passenger. Each button has three settings, LO, HI
and off. The active setting appears on the climate control
panel display. The LO setting warms the seatback
and cushion until the seat approximates normal body
temperature. The HI setting has a slightly higher
temperature.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, pull up on
the lever without applying pressure to the seatback.
Manual Recline Lever
If your front passenger’s seat has a manual reclining
seatback, the lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to
lock the seatback in place.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Recliner
If your vehicle has power reclining seatbacks, the
control is located on the outboard side of the front seats.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Press the top of the vertical control forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback angle.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
The front seat head restraints can be adjusted up and
down. Pull up the head restraint to raise it. Press
the button located at the base of the head restraint and
push down on the restraint to lower it. The front seat
head restraints also tilt forward and rearward.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has third row seats, the head rests are
adjustable up and down and removable. Pull up on the
head rest to raise it. Press the button located at the base
of the head rest and push down on the rest to lower it.
The head rests must be removed before the third row
seat can be folded. To remove the head rests, press the
button located at the base of the head rest and pull the
head rest all the way out of the seat.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The second row outboard head rests can be adjusted
up and down. Pull up on the head rest to raise it
and push down on the head rest to lower it. The second
row head rests do not tilt. Your second row seat may
have a head rest in the center position.
Store the head rests in the storage compartment behind
the third row. Open the cover and insert the head rest
posts through the slats in the storage area. The head
rests must be stored with the front of the rest facing up.
Position and snap the head rests in the provided
storage tray.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Rear Seat Operation
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Adjusting the Second Row Seat
The second row seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion
and slide the seat with your body. Release the lever
and try to move the seat forward and rearward to
be sure it is locked into place.
Be sure to return the seat to the original position when
finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it
is locked in place.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat
The passenger’s side of the second row seat has an
easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out
of the third row seat, if your vehicle has one.
Stowable Seat
If your vehicle has a third row seat, it is a power
folding seat.
To operate the seat, pull the release handle located on
the top of the seatback. Fold the seatback forward,
then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback
to release the seat to tumble forward.
The head rests need to be removed before folding the
instructions for removing the third row seat head rests.
The seatback will not fold all of the way down if the
head rests are not removed.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before folding or unfolding the third row seat, all of the
following conditions must be met:
• The liftgate or passenger’s side rear door must
be open.
• The unlock button on either the remote keyless
entry transmitter or the door must be pressed
three times to enable the rear seat for two minutes,
or the ignition must be in ON or ACCESSORY.
• The vehicle must be in PARK (P).
• The vehicle cannot have a low battery.
After the seat has folded, the panel on the seat must be
folded forward to create the flat floor.
If the seat’s path is blocked it will stop and back away.
Press the button again to return the seat to its
previous position.
Inside Liftgate
The buttons that are used to operate the power folding
third row seat are located inside of the liftgate and behind
the second row seat on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
Before returning the third row seat to the passenger
seating position, the panel must be folded back
upon itself. Press and hold one of the power folding
seat buttons and the seat will unfold into the seating
position. If the seat is not unfolded fully into the seating
position, a chime will sound when the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P). This indicates that the seat is
not ready for a passenger.
Two buttons are located inside the liftgate. One button is
to tilt the seatback forward for added storage space or
when storing a flat tire. The other button is the power
folding seat button. The button behind the second row
seat is also a power folding seat button. Press and hold
either one of the two power folding seat buttons to fold
the seat.
Replace the head rests.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can
hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected
from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Position
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
We will start with the driver position.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each of the rear outside
passenger positions in the second row. Here is how
to attach the comfort guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located on
the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
on the seatback.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Child Restraints
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash.
Older Children
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-26. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants always should be secured in
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here is why:
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be
secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury. When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in
a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle – even when no child is in it.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
attached using only the top tether and anchor.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Second Row
Each outboard seating position in the rear seat has
exposed metal lower anchors in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located near the top
tether anchors.
There are two top tether anchors located on the side of
the wheel well in the rear cargo area. There is another
top tether anchor in the center of the rear cargo area.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or any third row position if a
national or local law requires that the top tether be
attached, or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
There is no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1. Find the lower anchors, if equipped, for the desired
seating position.
2. If the desired seating position does not have lower
anchors, see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
installing the child restraint using the safety belts.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower anchors, if equipped,
in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
5.1. Find the top tether anchor.
5.2. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
5.3. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
{CAUTION:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
In a crash, a child secured in a rear-facing
child restraint in the center rear seating position
could be injured by the vehicle’s armrest.
To reduce this risk, the armrest should first
be secured with a special armrest retention
strap. You can get this from your dealer.
There are no top tether anchors in the third row seating
positions. Do not secure a child restraint in the third
row if a national or local law requires that a top tether
be anchored or if the instructions that come with
the restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If you are using a rear-facing child restraint in the second
row center position, install the armrest retention strap.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
on page 1-39.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
restraint has a top tether.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger,
• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger,
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
The roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
for either side impact or rollover deployment.
6. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal or in rear
crashes. The vehicle is designed to deploy the
roof-mounted side impact airbags in the event
of a vehicle rollover.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the passenger directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Never secure anything to the
roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or
tie-down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating airbag will
be blocked. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the front
passenger and the passenger directly behind the front
passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
which helps the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are “rollover capable”
and are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes or during a rollover. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
impacts or rear impacts. A side impact airbag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the case
of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag,
the sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to roll
over. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from
the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel, instrument panel, the side of
the front seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags deflate more
slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes
after the vehicle comes to rest. Some components of
the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for
the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest
to the door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags
and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle near the
side windows — may be hot for a short time. The
parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
The hazard warning flashers will also come on when
the airbags deploy. If you want to turn them off,
press the hazard warning flasher button twice.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them, the
air bag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or sides
of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal
or height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are too close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape, yellow coverings or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering on
the ceiling near the side windows, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s airbag, the airbag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,
or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering
for the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does
not need regular maintenance.)
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you
in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key works all of
the lock cylinders on
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle Theft-Deterrent
System. The key has a transponder in the key head
that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The key will
have PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer
if you need a new key made.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the liftgate and turn on your vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 10 feet (3 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Q (Lock): Press this
symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
to lock the doors. This also
arms the theft-deterrent
system.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
on page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound when you
lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
more information on programming this feature.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work. If
a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
m (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter to open and
close the liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime
will sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening
and closing.
W(Unlock): Press this symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This
also disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the
button again to unlock the rest of the doors.
The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to
recall the memory settings for up to two drivers. For
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash when you unlock the doors with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
on programming this feature.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work. If
a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
L(Panic Alarm): The remote keyless entry transmitter
comes equipped with an instant panic alarm. Press
the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm, press the
symbol again or turn the ignition to ON.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
or similar object to remove the old battery.
Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under
the cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be
sure no moisture can enter.
5. Press any button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors from the outside with the
key or remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting
off the alarm. If the windows are down and the doors
are locked, don’t reach in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly
and lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and
can suffer permanent injuries or even
death from heat stroke. Always lock your
vehicle whenever you leave it.
From the inside, use the
manual lock levers located
on the door panels near
the windows.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
You must use the manual levers to lock and unlock
the rear doors when riding in the rear seat.
Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.
When unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the
other doors by holding the key in the turned position for
a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in
the lock cylinder.
Delayed Locking
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of
the doors.
When the power door lock switch or the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed when
the key is not in the ignition and the driver’s door
is opened, a chime will sound three times indicating
that delayed locking is active.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located
on the front doors.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter again to override
this feature and lock the doors immediately.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors
will lock immediately when you press the power
door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
page 3-66 for more information.
Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch to
lock or the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on
your vehicle from the inside.
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The front
door inside handles will remain active. The doors will
unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move
the shift lever back into PARK (P).
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch for the rear doors. The front
doors will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle.
When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual lever or the power door
lock switch to lock the door.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-66.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. If you
close the doors, you can lock them using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by pressing the power lock switch a second time.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to disengage
the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open and close the liftgate, press and hold the power
liftgate button on the remote keyless entry
Power Liftgate
transmitter (RKE) until the liftgate starts moving. Press
the RKE button a second time during liftgate operations
to reverse that operation. See Remote Keyless Entry
Power Liftgate Operation
Your vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehicle must be
in PARK (P) to power open or close the liftgate.
The liftgate can also be power closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the
button a second time during liftgate operation to
reverse that operation. The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme low temperatures or
low battery condition. If this occurs, the liftgate can
still be operated manually.
The liftgate must be completely closed to power open or
the liftgate completely open to power close.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the
beginning of each power operation cycle.
{CAUTION:
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission
out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power
liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the
open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no
one in the way of the liftgate as it is closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door,
you could break the liftgate glass. Always check to
make sure the area above the liftgate is clear
before opening.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will hold open temporarily,
then slowly close. See your dealer for service before
using the liftgate.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull
cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate latch
will power cinch to closed position. Always close
the liftgate before driving.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally.
If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same
power cycle, the power function will deactivate, and
the liftgate will switch to manual operation. The Lift Gate
Ajar warning message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After
removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate
to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully
closed and latched position. The liftgate will now
resume normal power operation.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
Your vehicle has a pinch sensor located on the rear
edge of the rear quarter panel windows. If an object is
caught between the liftgate and the window and presses
against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction
and open fully. The liftgate will remain open until
it is activated again or closed manually.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control
Manual Liftgate Operation
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
With the doors unlocked, the power liftgate can always
be manually opened and closed.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
This feature is on all the power windows. Press the
down arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-down feature. If you want to
stop the window as it is lowering, press the down
arrow on the switch again.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest near each
window. Press the up or
down arrows on the
switches to raise or
lower the windows.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on both front power windows. Press
the up arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is raising, press the up arrow on
the switch again.
Programming the Power Windows
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off for up to 10 minutes.
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions
are clear of the window path.
2. Press and hold the down arrow on the power
window switch until the window has fully opened.
3. Press the up arrow on the power window switch
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the up arrow on the switch for
approximately two seconds after the window is
completely closed.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other front window.
In an emergency, the express window anti-pinch feature
can be overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the
window switch all the way down in the express position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released, the express mode is
re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction
or condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To restore power to the passenger windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
Window Lockout
This feature allows you to disable the passenger
window switches.
You can program this feature to disable all passenger
windows or only the rear passenger windows. See
information.
The passenger window
lockout button is located
below the power window
switches on the driver’s
door armrest.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
The driver’s sunshade may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Press the button to disable the passenger window
controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating
that the feature is in use. The passenger windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will
automatically come on. The light will go out when you
close the cover.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound
and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
doors with a key, use the manual door lock or if
the liftgate is ajar. It activates only if you use the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock.
Theft-Deterrent System
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
The security light
is located on
the instrument
panel cluster.
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Pressing the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a
door any other way while the system is armed will
activate the alarm when a door or the liftgate is
opened.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light
will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the
driver’s door with your key. You can also turn off the
alarm by using the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with a
valid key.
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power door lock switch.
2. Close all the doors. The security light will illuminate.
It should go off within approximately 30 seconds.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing the Alarm
Immobilizer
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter and
close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds
until the security light goes off.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash.
1. This device may not cause interference.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with
a valid key.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-96. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system to have a new key made.
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for
the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional
keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service the theft-deterrent system
to have new keys made. To program additional keys
you will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
The system works when you turn the key to ON. The
key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle. The correct key will start
the vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program a new key do the following:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines for the first
500 miles (805 km):
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within ten seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the security light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
If these procedures are not followed, your engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine, but still turn the steering wheel.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission and you turn off
the engine, the transmission will lock. If you need to
shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition key
has to be in ON.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert a narrow, pointed object into the hole in the
steering column cover and press the spring.
Steering Column Ignition Lock Release
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with
low voltage, you can still release the ignition lock and
remove the key. Use the following procedure to release
the steering column:
4. Then, turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove
the key.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
from ON to OFF:
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes
or if a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition
key to ON and then back to OFF.
1. Locate the plastic screw head on the underside of
the plastic cover for the steering column.
2. Insert a flat, thin object into the slot and turn it
until the plastic piece detaches from the steering
column cover.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the Engine
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the side of the steering
column.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. Then, let go of the key;
the engine will start automatically. The idle speed
will go down as your engine gets warm.
2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you turn the key to
START. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing.
Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer
to your body. Move the switch forward to move the
pedals away from your body.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord.
This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 3.6L V6 engines, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle in front of the fuse block. For the
4.6L V8 engine, remove the engine compartment
beauty cover and the cord is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle above the strut.
You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-30. If you are pulling a trailer, see
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while pressing the
button on the shift lever as you maintain brake
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your transmission.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you are:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift
Control (DSC), you could damage your vehicle.
Always upshift when necessary while using DSC.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. To use the
DSC feature:
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping
on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
When the transmission
is in DSC mode the
sport mode light in the
instrument panel cluster
will come on.
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are examples for using FOURTH (4) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still
shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
This position may also offer improved trailer towing
performance in certain driving conditions.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in
snowy and icy conditions, you may want to shift
into second gear. A higher gear allows you to gain
more traction on slippery surfaces.
The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will
change from the mileage to a number indicating
the requested gear range when moving the
shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer
on the odometer.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing/descending hills
to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power
or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine rpm is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when
the vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow for
more power during take-off and passing.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
more information.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot. See
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it
with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key
in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift Lock Release
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, you can still shift the vehicle into PARK (P)
and remove the ignition key. Use the following
procedure to release the shift lever:
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-26 for more information.
1. Use a tool to remove
the cap with the
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) while pushing the button on the shift lever
as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the
pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK (P), try the
following:
lock symbol located
next to the shift lever.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. Open and
close the driver’s door to turn off the RAP feature.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
2. Using a narrow, pointed tool, press down on the
mechanism under the cap so that you can move
the shift lever.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-52.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirrors
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For more
on page 2-40.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass and OnStar® controls.
O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on the lower
left side of the mirror, is used for the automatic dimming
functions of the rearview mirror.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
upper right corner of the mirror. When on, the compass
automatically calibrates, or sets the driving direction,
as the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle has the navigation
option, the direction the vehicle is facing will be
displayed on the navigation screen.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time
the vehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces
the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is on.
O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on the lower
left side of the mirror and is used for the automatic
dimming and compass functions of the rearview mirror.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started.
The compass can be calibrated by pressing and holding
the on/off button until a C is shown in the compass
display.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
the on/off button. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is on.
Compass Variance
Compass Operation
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass direction.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the
letter C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need to be reset or calibrated.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the mirror to be adjusted is selected, use the
arrows on the directional control pad to move the mirror.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of the
vehicle and the area behind it.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The controls on the
driver’s door armrest
operate both outside
rearview mirrors.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash or
a confined space. To fold, push the mirror toward
the vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to their
original unfolded position before driving.
The preferred position can be stored in memory if the
vehicle has the memory option. See Memory Seat
When the rear window defogger is turned on, both
outside rearview mirrors are heated to help clear them
of ice, snow, and condensation. See “Rear Window
page 3-25 for more information.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
control to choose the driver’s side or passenger’s side
mirror. The center position is off and will not move
the mirrors if the directional control pad is touched.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
The driver’s outside mirror may have an automatic
dimming feature that helps to reduce glare from other
vehicles headlamps. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors, it will also
be capable of adjusting the passenger’s mirror to tilt
to a preselected position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). Use this feature to view the
curb when parallel parking.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so that more can be seen
from the driver’s seat. The mirror does not have
a dimming feature.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
after a five-second delay, the passenger’s mirror
will return to its original position.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror controls can be used. See Outside Power
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
OnStar® System
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. if you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
OnStar® Services
The Directions and Connections® Plan is included on
new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
Directions and Connections Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Universal Home Remote
System
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control
buttons are located on
the driver’s sun visor.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete
the programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section or, for assistance, see Customer
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
Programming Universal Home Remote
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button
is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button
for two seconds, then release. Repeat the
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell Phone Storage Area
Storage Areas
Your vehicle has a closeable cell phone/sunglasses
storage area inside both of the front doors. Press
the button to open the door.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your
door key to lock or unlock it.
Front Storage Area
Your vehicle has a closeable storage area inside both of
the front doors. Press the button to open the door.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has cupholders located between the front
seats. Slide the cover back to expose them. There
are also cupholders in the armrest of the second row
seat. Press the panel on the front of the armrest
to expose the cupholders. On the outboard sides of
the third row there may also be cupholders.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas,
and accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the
console.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has
side rails attached to the roof. You can get sliding
crossrails through your dealer to use for tying things
down. These let you load some things on top of
your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer
than the luggage carrier.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cargo management system has three
Convenience Net
compartments. The one closest to the front of the
vehicle opens from behind the second row. The center
compartment has a divider. The compartment closest
to the rear of the vehicle has a removable storage bin.
If your vehicle has a convenience net, the convenience
net attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear of
the vehicle using six anchor points. The net can be
used like a hammock across the rear of the vehicle or
hooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocery
bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from falling
over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Sunroof
Sunroof (UltraView)
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.
{CAUTION:
Cargo Cover
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured or
killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant, in
any motor vehicle, but if you have the Ultraview
roof it is, if anything, even more important. In a
rollover or other crash, the Ultraview roof can
be damaged or destroyed. People who are
unbelted would then be at even greater risk
of being ejected from the vehicle. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check that your
passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover
from the passenger’s side to the driver’s side and slide
the ends into the slots to secure it. When it is not in
use, take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover
to roll back up.
Cargo Management System
Your vehicle may have a cargo management system.
It provides extra storage space for the rear of the
vehicle.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have an UltraView sunroof over the
first two rows of seats. The ignition must be on, or
in accessory, or the Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active for to operate it. See Retained Accessory
Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the
sunshade. Press the front of the switch to the first
stop to close the sunshade to a desired position at
a normal speed. Press the switch forward to the
second stop to express close the sunshade.
The sunroof/sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of
the obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse.
driver and front passenger.
To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, remove
the obstruction and press the front of the sunroof switch.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade, do the
following.
1. With the engine running, press and hold both
the sunroof switch in the open position and
the sunshade switch in the closed position for
six seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
3. When the sunroof reaches the fully closed position,
the sunshade will close.
4. After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed,
continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed
position for an additional three or four seconds
to complete the Teach Process.
One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch
operates the sunshade.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. When the switch is pressed to the first stop
the sunroof will open to a desired position. Press
the switch to the second stop to express open the
sunroof to a preset comfort position. Press the second
stop again to fully express open the sunroof. Press
the front of the switch to close the sunroof. The first stop
will close the sunroof at a desired position at normal
speed, and the second stop will express close the roof.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have an UltraView sunroof over the
first two rows of seats and a smaller sunroof over
the third row seat. Both have sunshades, but the back
sunroof does not open.
Sunroof (UltraView Plus)
{CAUTION:
The sunroof/sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured
or killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant,
in any motor vehicle, but if you have the
Ultraview roof it is, if anything, even more
important. In a rollover or other crash, the
Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed.
People who are unbelted would then be at
even greater risk of being ejected from the
vehicle. Always fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passengers’ belts are fastened
properly too.
One switch operates the front sunroof and another
switch operates the front sunshade. The third switch is
for the rear sunshade.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. Press the switch to the first stop to open the
sunroof to a desired position. Press the switch to
the second stop to express open the sunroof to a preset
comfort stop. Press the switch at the second stop
again to express open the sunroof completely.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the front of the sunroof switch to close the
sunroof. Press the switch to the first stop to close the
sunroof to a desired position. Press the front of the
switch to the second stop to express close the sunroof.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the front sunroof and front and rear
sunshades, do the following.
1. With the engine running, press and hold the rear
sunshade switch in the closed position for about
15 seconds – the shade will move to the stop
position.
Press the back of the front sunshade switch to open
it. Press it to the first stop to open the front sunshade to
a desired position. Press it again to express open the
sunshade. Press the front of the front sunshade
switch to close it. Press to the first stop to close it to
a desired position. Press the switch to the second stop
to express close the front sunshade
2. Momentarily release the button, and press the
rear sunshade switch in the closed position
again. The shade will now move to the fully open
position and then return to the fully closed position.
Keep the switch pushed in the closed position
for the entire open/close cycle of the shade.
Press the back of the rear sunshade switch to open the
rear sunshade. Press the front of the switch to close
the rear sunshade.
3. At the same time, press and hold the front
sunroof switch in the open position and the front
sunshade switch in the closed position for about
six seconds.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the
sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction
and press the front of the sunroof switch.
When the front sunroof reaches the fully closed
position, the front sunshade will close.
4. After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed,
continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed
position for an additional three or four seconds
to complete the Teach Process.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The buttons for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Memory Seat and Mirrors
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s
seating and outside rearview mirror driving positions for
up to two drivers. If your vehicle has the adjustable
throttle and brake pedal feature, you can also program
and recall memory settings for the throttle and brake
pedal driving positions.
Use the following steps to program the buttons:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner, both outside mirrors, and the throttle
and brake pedals.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat and
mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored
driving positions.
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall
the stored setting. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit
position has been saved.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the remote keyless
entry transmitter with the number 2 on the back.
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not be
recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle is
not in PARK (P).
To recall the stored exit positions, press and release
the exit button. One beep will sound, and the seat
will move to the previously stored exit position for the
currently identified driver. If an exit position has not been
stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way
back. The position of the outside mirrors is not stored or
recalled for the exit position.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or when you place the
key in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-66.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit
positions.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program exit
positions:
Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will not be
recalled if you press the exit button when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P).
1. Press memory seat button 1 or the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter with the number 1 on the back to
recall the driving position.
If you would like your stored exit position to be recalled
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter or when the ignition is turned off
and the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-80.
on page 3-9.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the
vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
page 3-16.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-9.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
page 3-12.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal
On message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC
information.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
turn or lane change.
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change from
high to low beam.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it’s released.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on, the
high beams will be on the next time you start your
vehicle.
This light on the
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other driver’s won’t see the signal.
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature allows you to use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When you do, the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay
on as long as you hold the lever there. Release
the lever to turn them off.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they
will switch to low beam. To return to high-beam,
push the lever away from you.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off the
wipers.
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
Windshield Washer
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
{CAUTION:
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-51.
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this symbol
located at the end of the windshield washer lever to
wash the windshield. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, press and
hold the button.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check Washer
Fluid message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for more information.
If the headlamps are on when you wash the windshield,
the headlamp washer (if equipped) will turn on. Both
the windshield and the headlamps will be washed.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button to turn
the rear wiper on.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
J (Washer Fluid): Press this button to wash and
wipe the window.
{CAUTION:
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
& (Delay): Press this side of the button to turn on
The switch for the rear
washer/wiper is located in
the overhead console.
delayed wiping.
To turn either the delay or rear wiper setting off, press
the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off
position. Pressing the button all the way down on either
side will activate a wiper setting.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid
is low, the headlamp washers will not work.
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers. The
headlamp washers clear debris from the headlamp
lenses.
information.
Cruise Control
These controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside of
the headlamps.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position activates the system.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Both
the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
{CAUTION:
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the speed when cruise is
already active.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light on the
Setting Cruise Control
instrument panel cluster
will come on while
cruise control is on.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
to resume/accelerate.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end
of the lever to increase cruise set speed, your new
set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current
speed for this method to work. If it is not 5 mph higher,
switch cruise switch off, then on, and then reset your
speed using the set button.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake to
keep your speed down. Applying the brake will take you
out of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake
due to the grade of the downhill slope, you may not
want to attempt to use your cruise control feature.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ending Cruise Control
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise
control session only. Move the cruise control switch
to off to turn off the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking
lamp position and the windshield wiper control is in
any position except off, the Headlamps Suggested
message will appear on the DIC display. See
“Headlamps Suggested Message” under DIC Warnings
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it’s dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it’s bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If you start your vehicle in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take
about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
lever is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL
can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but
they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
If it’s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a Headlamps Suggested message will appear
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC) display.
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated. Turning the exterior lamp control
to AUTO or to the low-beam headlamp position will turn
off the DRL and cancel the Headlamps Suggested
message. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and the
Headlamps Suggested message will be displayed.
You can turn it off by pressing the OK button if you have
the Navigation audio system or the CLR button if you
have the Base audio system.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or START,
• the exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO with the
headlamps off, and
• an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P) or the
parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the
DRL are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be lit
up either.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps or parking
lamps, and the DRL will turn off. The Headlamps
Suggested message will appear on the DIC display.
This will work regardless of gear position and whether or
not the parking brake is set.
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
- (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used
to turn the front fog lamps on and off.
Light Sensor
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on the
lever up to the dot and release it. The band will
return to its original position.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band up
to the dot and release it. The band will return to
its original position, and the fog lamps will turn off.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will also turn off. They’ll turn back on again when
you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If you
cover the sensor, it will read dark, and the exterior
lamps or the Headlamps Suggested message will
appear on the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the lights
or away from it to dim them.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to OFF. This protects against
draining the battery in case you have accidentally
left the headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery
saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on
after the ignition is turned to OFF.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the symbol past
the resistance point, the interior lamps will come on.
To turn them off, slide the lever back toward the
minimum brightness setting.
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the
light sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if
the ignition key is turned to ON, or immediately
deactivate if the power locks are activated.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The lever for this
feature is located on
the overhead console.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parade Dimming
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when
the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on.
This feature operates with the light sensor and is
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness
outside and the parking lamps are active, the instrument
panel displays can be adjusted by sliding the instrument
panel brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten
or away from the symbol to dim the lighting.
Your vehicle may have the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system. It is designed to help you park
while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates only
at very low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can
help make parking easier and help you avoid colliding
with objects such as parked vehicles. The URPA system
can detect objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
vehicle, and tell you how close these objects are from
your rear bumper.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the liftgate glass.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely
as you do.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system turns on, the
three lights on the display will illuminate for one and a
half seconds to let you know that the system is working.
If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash
to remind you that the system does not work at a speed
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of
air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
see your dealer.
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
Description
Amber light
Amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
Amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
Amber/amber/
red lights flashing &
continuous chime
1 ft
0.3 m
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-90.
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,
it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console on the instrument panel, one in the rear of the
center console, one in the rear compartment, and
there may be an additional outlet in the rear of the
center console.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet.
If it does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover
it with the protective cap.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the
rear seat passengers.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control panel
on the instrument panel. Press on the door to release
the ashtray.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop back out by itself.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the instrument
panel by gripping the edges and pulling straight out.
To reinstall, push the tray back into place.
There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Climate Controls
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, the
air conditioning compressor and the fan speed. AUTO
will appear on the display.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). If you have the Base
have the Navigation system, see “Setup Menu” in the
Navigation System Manual.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.
[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows), and a little air directed to
the windshield.
Manual Operation
zNy (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
z9y (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-30 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter may
need to be replaced. For more information, see
QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature): Press
the PWR button located on the driver’s side of the
climate control panel to turn the entire climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to increase or decrease the temperature
inside your vehicle.
h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more
quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. The air-conditioning compressor also
comes on.
QPWRR (Power/Passenger’s Temperature): Press
the PWR button located on the passenger’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s climate
control system on. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to increase or decrease the temperature for
the front passenger.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
will automatically turn off after 10 minutes when defog
is selected.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor. Press
AUTO to return to automatic operation or press the
A/C OFF button again.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in your
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
Sensors
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the
air inside your vehicle, then use the information to
maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and
the air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary.
Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate
control system will not work properly.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
for more information.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the side
windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
zNy (Mode): Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air between the
windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When you
select this mode, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter
defog mode. If you select recirculation while in defog
mode, it will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
for more information. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
j (Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheel to this
symbol to use the side window defog setting. The air
coming through the outlets will be directed toward
the side windows to clear fog.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. Or, if the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stay
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
open the outlets completely and allow the maximum
amount of air to enter your vehicle. A small amount of air
will still be directed to the side windows.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering
the vehicle.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when
the rear window defogger button is on.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Tips
Rear Air Conditioning System
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning system it has
two fan speed selectors. One fan speed selector is
located in the front overhead console and the other is
located in the headliner above the second row seats. The
rear air conditioning system is designed to provide cooled
air only. There is no heating provided with this system.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment
Front Control
Rear Control
To operate the rear system using the front control,
just turn the knob to the fan position you want.
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to
the AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used
to increase and decrease the airflow.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location.
2. Push the two tabs on the access panel door
towards the windshield.
Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
3. While pressing forward, lift the access panel out of
the clipped position and pull towards the front of the
vehicle. This releases the clips and allows the
panel door to be removed.
1. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
information. Locate the passenger compartment
air filter access panel door.
4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one. Make
sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the
passenger compartment.
page 6-14 for the correct part number for the filter.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and
even dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
for more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometers
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). To access the trip odometer, use one
of the following procedures:
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is
because your vehicle’s computer has stored the
mileage in memory.
Using the Base audio system, do the following:
1. Press the INFO (Information) button located to
the right of the screen to access the DIC menu.
2. Scroll through the menu using the up or down
arrows on the INFO button until you reach
Trip Odometer A or Trip Odometer B.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the odometer will change to show the gear range.
for more information.
The selected trip odometer (A or B) will be displayed
at the top of the screen with the accumulated
mileage.
3. Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer.
You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing
CLR (Clear) button located in the center of the
INFO button to the right of the screen. The mileage
for that trip odometer will return to zero. Each trip
odometer must be reset individually.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
This gage indicates
the engine speed
in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
Engine Speed Limiter
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the chime will
not come on.
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpms are too high, the throttle is closed to reduce
speed. If this is not sufficient, then the fuel supply to
the engine will be limited. When the rpms return
to normal, the fuel supply will return to normal.
This helps prevent damage to the engine.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate without a
crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced right away
if the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on
the DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for more information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
When you turn the key
to ON or START, this light
will come on briefly to
show that the generator
and battery charging
systems are working
properly.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of the brake
system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
If the TC (traction control)
This light tells you that
your engine is very hot.
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may
be a problem with the
traction control system.
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
This light will come on when you first start the vehicle
as a check to let you know that the light is working. It will
go out after a few seconds. If the light does not come
on, the bulb may be burned out. See your GM dealer to
have it corrected.
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC (traction control) on/off
button located near the shift lever.
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and
stays on while you are driving, your vehicle may
have a problem with the cooling system. You should
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning
chime will sound when this light is on, also.
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or
comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as
soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the
system by turning the ignition off then back on. If
the light still stays on or comes back on again while you
are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
traction control system inspected as soon as possible.
more information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into
the shaded area, the
engine is too hot.
If your vehicle has the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM)
System, this light will come
on if the system detects
low tire pressure.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
more information.
That reading means the same thing as the warning
light – the engine coolant is very hot. See Engine
For more information on the proper tire pressure,
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it
is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to
do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds
and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light
is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your
dealer for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If the Light is Flashing
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Sport Mode Light
This light will come on
while the Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature
is in use.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
If equipped, this light
tells you if there could be
a problem with your
engine oil pressure.
When you stop using the DSC feature, the light will
go out. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under
more information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
regarding this light, see
on page 2-18.
information.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
for more information.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how
much fuel is in the tank.
It works only when
the ignition is in ON.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Controls
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s
systems. It is also used to display driver personalization
features and warning/status messages. All messages
will appear on the audio system display.
If your vehicle has the Base audio system, use the
information contained in this manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see the
Navigation system manual for instructions on operating
the DIC for your vehicle.
Use the following controls located on the audio system
to operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Use the up or down arrows on this
switch to scroll through the system status information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button to clear DIC messages
and to reset some DIC displays to zero. This button
is also used to exit out of a menu. See DIC Warnings
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: To scroll through the menu
items displayed, turn the knob, located in the lower
right corner. Press the knob to select the menu item.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)*
• AVG MPH (AVG KM/H)*
• TIMER*
Status of Vehicle Systems
You can view the status of several vehicle systems
using the DIC.
• BATTERY VOLTS
Vehicle Information Menu
• ENGINE OIL LIFE*
To access this menu, press the up or down arrow on
the INFO switch located to the right of the display.
• TRANS FLUID LIFE*
• PSI LF TIRE (KPA LF TIRE)
• PSI RF TIRE (KPA RF TIRE)
• PSI RR TIRE (KPA RR TIRE)
• PSI LR TIRE (KPA LR TIRE)
• BLANK LINE
The following items are available when the ignition
is in ON. These items will not be available when
the ignition is in ACCESSORY. The tire pressure
menu items are only available if your vehicle has
the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System:
• OUTSIDE TEMP
• MI TRIP A (KM TRIP A)*
• MI TRIP B (KM TRIP B)*
• MILES RANGE (KM RANGE)
• MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG)*
• MPG INST (L/100 KM INST)
*These items can be reset. Each one must be reset
individually. For a detailed description of the menu
items and how to reset them, see “Vehicle Information
Menu Item Descriptions” later in this section.
You can view any of these items at any time, but only
one item can be displayed at a time.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low” under
information.
Vehicle Information Menu Item
Descriptions
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed
description of each menu item:
MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG): If you select this item, the
approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) is displayed. This number
is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was reset.
OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, the current
outside temperature is displayed at the top of the
screen. It will be in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C) depending upon whether the
system is set for English or metric units. If you wish to
To reset the MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG), press the CLR
button located to the right of the screen. The display
will return to zero.
MI TRIP A and B (KM TRIP A and B): For information
MPG INST (L/100 KM INST): If you select this item,
the current fuel economy is displayed. This number
reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right
now and will change frequently as driving conditions
change. Unlike average fuel economy, this menu item
cannot be reset.
MILES RANGE (KM RANGE): If you select this item,
the approximate number of remaining miles or
kilometers you can drive without refueling is displayed.
This estimate is based on the current driving conditions
and will change if the driving conditions change. For
example, if you are driving in traffic making frequent
stops, the display may read one number, but if you enter
the freeway, the number may change even though
you still have the same amount of gas in the gas tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED): If you select this
item, the number of gallons or liters of fuel used
since the last reset of this menu item is displayed.
To reset GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED), press
the CLR button located to the right of the screen.
The display will return to zero.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVG MPH (AVG KM/H): If you select this item, the
average speed of the vehicle is displayed in miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average
is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds
recorded since the last reset of this menu item.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
there are four possible DIC messages that may be
page 3-57 for more information.
ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining oil life is displayed. If you see
99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display, that means
that 99% of the current oil life remains.
To reset AVG MPH (AVG KM/H), press the CLR button
located to the right of the screen. The display will
return to zero.
TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature is
displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch in that
you can record the time it takes to travel from one point
to another.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
message will appear on the display. See your GM dealer
for service. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
To turn on the timer, press the CLR button located to
the right of the screen once. The display will read
00:00:00 TIMER ON and begin counting.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see “How to
Reset the Engine Oil Life System and the Oil Life
If you clear the Change Engine Oil message from
the display, it will not re-appear.
To turn off the timer, press the CLR button again. When
the timer is off, the display will show the timer value
and TIMER OFF. The timing feature will stop.
To reset the timer, turn off the timer and then press and
hold the CLR button. The display will return to zero.
BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, the current
battery voltage is displayed. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the display will have OK after it.
For example, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY
VOLTS OK.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANS FLUID LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining transmission fluid life is
displayed. If you see 99% TRANS FLUID LIFE on
the display, that means that 99% of the current
transmission fluid life remains.
RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s side
front tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is
low, LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI) or
kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see DIC Main
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the Change
Trans Fluid message will appear on the display. You
should change the transmission fluid as soon as
possible. Be sure to keep a written record of the mileage
and date of the fluid change so you will have it for
on page 6-12 for more information.
RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s side
rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure
is low, LOW will be displayed with this item. The
pressure can be displayed in pounds per square
inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To change the units,
LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side rear
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI)
or kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset
the transmission fluid life monitor separately. For
more information on resetting the transmission fluid
life monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-25.
BLANK LINE: If you select this item, nothing is
LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side front
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI)
or kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see
displayed at the top of the screen.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• H/A
DIC Main Menu
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
To access the main menu of the DIC, do the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
• TA
• MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE
• AF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the
menu items.
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
• 9 (English/Metric Units)
• TCS
The DIC main menu consists of the following
menu items:
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• e EQ
• 8 (Clock)
• 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display)
• SETUP
• DSP (Bose® Radio)
• DVD
• AVC (Bose® Radio)
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc): This menu item allows
you to turn the DVD on and off. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob once to turn DVD on and off. When DVD is on,
an X will be in the box next to DVD on the menu.
The X disappears when DVD is off.
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This menu
item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass,
midrange, treble, balance, and fade features of the
audio system. For more information, see “Setting the
Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting the Speakers
more information.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): If your
vehicle has a Bose® radio, this menu item allows you to
turn the AVC feature on and off. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob once to turn AVC on and off. When AVC is on,
an X will be in the box next to AVC on the menu.
The X disappears when AVC is off.
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you
to choose among five preset equalizations for the audio
system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio with CD
on page 3-82 for more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): If your vehicle has a
Bose® radio, this menu item allows you to select the
DSP type that you want on the audio system. You may
choose Normal, Talk, Spacious, Rear Seat or Driver
Seat. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through these
choices. Once the desired choice is displayed, turn
the knob to set your DSP choice and continue scrolling
through the main menu.
See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)” under
H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu item
allows you to switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob to switch between home and away.
page 3-82 for more information.
more information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows you to
automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See “Setting Preset Stations” under
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows
you to turn the AF feature on and off. To turn on AF,
press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When AF is on,
an X will be in the box next to AF on the menu.
The X disappears when AF is off.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to select
radio stations based on preset categories. To turn
the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
When CAT is on, an X will be in the box next to CAT
on the menu. The X disappears when CAT is off.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS and
information.
A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with
the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a
strong signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you
are in urban areas where there are several strong radio
station signals and you want to limit the number of
stations to those with the strongest signals only.
Use DISTANT when you are in rural areas where there
are fewer radio station signals available.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS and
information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allows
you to turn the TA feature on and off. To turn the
TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When
TA is on, an X will be in the box next to TA on the
menu. The X disappears when TA is off.
page 3-82 for more information.
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed, turn the
knob to set your choice and continue scrolling through
the main menu.
MSG (Message) RECALL RDS (Radio Data System)
MESSAGE: This menu item allows you to view an
RDS radio station message broadcast by a radio station.
To view the message, press the TUNE/SEL knob
once. The message will appear on the screen.
page 3-82 for more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (English/Metric Units): Use this menu item to
adjust the measurement units.
8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time on the
vehicle’s clock.
You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed,
turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling
through the main menu.
8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display): Use this menu
item to toggle between the clock display and the
XM™ Information (Song, Artist, Title), if available.
The measurement units that you choose will be
reflected on all the vehicle system displays, not just
the DIC information. For example, the climate control
panel will display degrees Celsius if you choose
METRIC UNITS.
for more information.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the following
submenu is available:
TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable
or disable the traction control system using this menu
item. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off.
• LANGUAGE
• PERSONALIZATION
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
You can also turn the traction control system off using
the traction control button located near the shift lever.
To change the language displayed on the radio, select
LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob. Turn the
TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the available languages
and press the knob to make your selection. If you
accidentally select a language that you did not want,
ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
When you disable the traction control system, the
traction control system warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on. See Traction Control System
For more information on the other items in the SETUP
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the CLR button.
Battery Voltage High
This message indicates that the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above approximately
16 volts, this message will be displayed.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio,
set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed
on the highest setting, and turn the rear window
defogger on.
Battery Saver Active
This message appears when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle which you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled,
this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle
is trying to save the charge in the battery.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button
until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Voltage Low
Change Engine Oil
This message will appear when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been
drained.
This message indicates that the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed and that
your vehicle is due for service. See your GM dealer.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine
from the display, it will not re-appear.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked by your
GM dealer immediately to determine the cause of this
problem.
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
This message indicates that the life of the transmission
fluid has expired and it should be changed. See
and change intervals.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
transmission fluid life monitor separately. For more
information on resetting the transmission fluid life
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Brake Fluid
Check Tire Pressure
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have
the brake system serviced by your GM dealer as
soon as possible. See Brake System Warning Light
information.
This message indicates that one or more of the vehicle’s
page 3-49 for information on checking your vehicle’s tire
pressures. Also, see Tire Pressure Monitor System
for more information.
Check Coolant Level
Check Washer Fluid
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. You
should refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38 for more information.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
Driver Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s door was not closed completely.
You should make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
This message will appear when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Engine
Check Gas Cap
When this message appears on the display, the gas cap
has not been fully tightened. You should recheck the
gas cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
See “If the Light Is On Steady” under Malfunction
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Hot – AC
(Air Conditioning) Off
Engine Overheated – Stop Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message will appear when the engine has
overheated. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off
immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See
sound when this message is displayed.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine
Engine Power Reduced
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 for more information.
This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing
engine power because the transmission is being
placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage
to the vehicle’s engine or transmission. This also can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Level Low
Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. A single chime will sound
when this message is displayed.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Headlamps Suggested
Lift Gate Ajar
This message will appear when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamp
control is off. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even
though the daytime running lamps (DRL) are still
illuminated and it has become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the liftgate was not closed completely. You
should make sure that the liftgate is closed completely.
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This message will also appear when the windshield
wipers have been on for more than six seconds and the
exterior lamp control is off or in the parking lamp position.
Ice Possible
This message appears when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions.
A multiple chime will sound when this message is
displayed.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Door Ajar
Service Brake Assist
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side front door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
This message will display when a problem with the
panic brake assist system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
Service Charging System
Right Rear Door Ajar
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should check to make sure that
the door is closed completely.
Service Electrical System
This message will display if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
or the ignition switch. Have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer.
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
This message appears when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
Service Fuel System
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected a
problem within the fuel system when this message
appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
Service Air Bag
There is a problem with the airbag system when this
message appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-37 for more information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Idle Control
Service Suspension System
A problem with the idle control has occurred when
this message displays. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
This message is displayed to indicate that the
suspension system is not operating properly.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer.
Service Stability System
Service Theft System
This message will be displayed if there has been a
problem detected with StabiliTrak®.
This message means there is a problem with the
information. A fault has been detected in the system,
which means that the system is disabled and is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts,
however, you may want to take your vehicle to your
GM dealer before turning off the engine.
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on, or comes
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by
Service Tire Monitor System
This message will appear if the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Have
your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon
as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-62 for more information.
Service Steering System
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
This message will be displayed if a problem is detected
with the speed variable assist steering system. When
this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Transmission
Stability System Off
This message will display if there is a problem with
the transmission of your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
This message will be displayed any time you turn off
StabiliTrak® using the TC (traction control) on/off button.
more information. When this message has been
displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist
you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
Stability System Ready
Speed Limited to 80 mph (129 km/h)
This message will be displayed any time you turn
StabiliTrak® on again using the TC (traction control)
on/off button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9 for more information. When this message
has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is ready to assist
you with directional control of the vehicle, if needed.
This message indicates that your vehicle speed
is limited to 80 mph (129 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the suspension system.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer.
Stability System Engaged
Starting Disabled – Remove Key
This message will be displayed any time StabiliTrak®
is actively assisting you with directional control of
the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may exist when
this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message may stay on for a few
seconds after StabiliTrak® stops assisting you with
This message will appear when the vehicle
theft-deterrent system detects that an improper ignition
key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check
the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need
to be replaced. If it is not damaged, remove the key
and try to start the vehicle again. If it still does not start,
try another ignition key or have your vehicle serviced
by your GM dealer.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
Traction Engaged
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
This message will appear when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the traction control
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
Theft Attempted
This message is displayed if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off
This message indicates that the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until the transmission cools down or until
this message is removed.
This message will appear when the Engine Control
Module (ECM) detects that the maximum speed for your
vehicle has been reached. Your vehicle’s top speed is
based on the top speed rating of the tires. This ensures
that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for
the tires.
Turn Signal On
If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will appear
as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Personalization Menu
DIC Vehicle Personalization
To enter the feature programming mode, use the
following procedure:
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two people. The number of programmable features
varies depending upon which model of the vehicle is
purchased.
1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display will show
either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button
was selected.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock,
remote lock and unlock confirmation, and automatic
door locks have already been programmed for
your convenience.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the main
menu of the DIC.
Some vehicles have additional features that can be
programmed including the seat and outside rearview
mirror position.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is
highlighted.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences are
recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, 1 or 2, or by pressing the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on the
driver’s door. Certain features can be programmed
not to recall until the key is placed in the ignition.
To change feature preferences, see “Entering the
Personalization Menu” following.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
SETUP menu.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until the feature you want
to change is highlighted, then press the TUNE/SEL
knob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature
is turned on, a check mark will appear next to the
feature name.
If none of the personalization items are turned on,
turn on the personalization menu by pressing
the TUNE/SEL knob. The list of features will then
appear, and you can repeat Step 6.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display.
Personalization Features
The following choices are available for programming:
If you make a mistake, press the CLR button.
This will exit the menu. You can then go back
into the menu and edit the name. You can also
press the TUNE/SEL knob repeatedly to cycle
through all the characters until you reach the
character you wish to change.
Personalization Name
This feature allows you to type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display whenever the corresponding
remote keyless entry transmitter is used or one of
the buttons on the driver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is
pressed.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you want is
complete. You can program up to 16 characters.
If a customized name is not programmed, the system
will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 to correspond with
the numbers on the back of the remote keyless
entry transmitters.
The name you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
Configure Display Keys
1. Enter the Personalization menu following the
instructions listed previously.
This feature allows you to customize the functions of the
four soft keys located to the left and right of the audio
display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”
information.
2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu
item by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the
first letter you want. The letter will be highlighted.
There is a complete alphabet with both upper
and lower case letters and the numbers zero
through nine. Also included are spaces and other
non-letter characters such as the ampersand (&).
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Remote Exit Recall or Key in
Recall Memory cannot be selected.
Remote Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat, adjustable
pedals, and mirror controls when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Remote Exit Recall
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE EXIT
RECALL is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until KEY IN RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Key in Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat and mirror
positions when the key is inserted into the ignition.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Auto Exit Seat
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the key is removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
Twilight Delay
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
Mode 4: 1:00 minute
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is
highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since the vehicle left the factory.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a different
mode, use the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TWILIGHT DELAY
is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through and
select the available delay settings.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Lights Flash at Unlock
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will flash for approximately 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON, or START, or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both the lights
flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle.
Lights Flash at Lock
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Horn Sounds at Lock
This feature sounds the horn once when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
All doors must be closed for this feature to work.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until HORN SOUNDS AT
LOCK is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At Lock
will also be on. You can choose Lights Flash At Lock
by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock will always have
Lights Flash At Lock enabled when it is selected.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EXT. LIGHT AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Exterior Lights at Unlock
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON, or START, or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Driver Unlock in Park
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Driver Unlock Key Out
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
Mode 2: OFF
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
KEY OUT is highlighted.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock Key Out,
Doors Unlock Key Out, or Doors Unlock in Park
cannot be selected.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock in Park,
Doors Unlock in Park, or Doors Unlock Key Out
cannot be selected.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Doors Unlock in Park
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock Key Out,
Driver Unlock Key Out, or Driver Unlock in Park
cannot be selected.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock in Park,
Driver Unlock in Park, or Driver Unlock Key Out
cannot be selected.
Doors Unlock Key Out
This feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the key is removed from the ignition.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Delayed Locking
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
up to five seconds after a power door lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed. The five second delay occurs after the
last door is closed.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK
KEY OUT is highlighted.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DELAYED LOCKING
is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LOCK PASS
WINDOW is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Lock Passenger Window
This feature allows you to disable either all the
passenger window switches or the rear passenger
window switches only. If this feature is turned on, all
passenger window switches will be disabled when
the window lockout button is pressed. If the feature is
off, only the rear passenger window switches will
more information.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mirror to Curb in Reverse
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
the passenger’s outside rearview mirror will move
downward so you can view the curb when the shift lever
is shifted into REVERSE (R). The mirror will return to
the last known driving position when the shift lever
is moved out of REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until MIRROR TO CURB
IN REV is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Enhanced Chime Volume
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: LOUD
To exit the personalization portion of the SETUP menu,
press the CLR button once you have finished making
your selections. You will return to the main audio screen.
If a 15 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made, the SETUP menu will be exited
automatically.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ENHANCED CHIME
VOLUME is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and loud settings.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving
on page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Audio System(s)
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Setting the Time
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment
system. If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the
display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
configuring the keys.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See
more information.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” later in this
section for more information.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/Information Display):
Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button to switch between
the clock display, the XM™ screen, and the XM™
information display.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): Available
only with the premium Bose® audio system. AVC,
which utilizes Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology, continuously adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for background noise, so
that your music always sounds the same at the set
volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio
volume settings where background noise can affect
how well you hear the music being played through your
vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,
where the music is much louder than the background
noise, there may be little or no adjustments by AVC.
To turn AVC on and off, perform the following steps:
Press this button while in XM™ mode to retrieve three
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, and Category.
To view this information, perform the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select CLOCK/INFO
DISP. The display will change to show the additional
XM™ information.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO VOLUME
COMP. appears on the display.
4. To return to the original display, press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or off.
An X will appear in the box when AVC is selected on.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN
appears on the display. The radio will go to the
first preset station stored on your firm keys, play for
5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source, either
radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded the display will
not change from the radio source.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you can
set the radio to search for local stations or stations that
are further away for a larger selection. To set this feature
to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the following steps:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL or
SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
SEEK will appear on the display. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enter scan
mode. SCAN will appear on the display. Press the
up arrow to scan to the next station. The radio will go
to a station, play for 5 seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or down
arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear
in the display and seek to stations with strong signals
only. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK will
appear in the display and seek to stations with weak and
strong signals.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered firm keys, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
1. Turn the radio on.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. AUTOSTORE
will appear on the display. The radio will
3. Tune in the desired station.
automatically search the band and select and store
the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
The stations will be stored by signal strength, not
sequential order. The set preset station number will
appear on the display above the firm key that it
is set to. Whenever that numbered firm key is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station that
was set will return.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered firm keys
for two seconds until you hear a beep. The set
preset station number will appear on the display
above the firm key that it is set to. Whenever
that numbered firm key is pressed for less than
two seconds, the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each firm key.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each
of these features later in this section. When a preset
station is selected, once one of these additional
settings is selected, the preset station will remember
each setting and it will remain active, until the
setting is selected off for that preset station.
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you the
ability to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for stations available where you live
and AWAY can be for stations available outside of
your local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for
home and away perform the following steps:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOME or
AWAY will appear on the display.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
settings.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to decrease
the bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting the preset firm keys for both home and away.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display.
To return to the original display repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the equalization
setting. The equalization setting will appear on
the display.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to BALANCE
or FADER.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the BALANCE
to the right or the left speakers and the FADER
to the front or the rear speakers.
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in this mode.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the listening
space seem larger.
Using DSP
Available only with the premium Bose® audio system,
this feature is used to provide a choice of five different
listening experiences: DSP normal, talk, spacious, rear
seat, and driver seat. DSP can be used while listening to
the radio or the CD player. The radio keeps separate
DSP settings for each band, preset, and source.
REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give
the rear seat passenger(s) the best possible sound
quality. Sound quality for the front seat passengers may
be different when this setting is used.
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give
the driver the best possible sound quality. Sound
quality for the front and rear seat passenger(s) may
be different when this setting is used.
To select a DSP choice, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the
five settings appears on the display.
RDS Messages
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP setting.
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT will
appear on the display. You will hear the announcement,
even if the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play will stop during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off. If the radio tunes to
a related network station for the announcement, it will
return to the original station when the announcement
is finished.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall
audio performance for all passengers. DSP NORMAL
will not appear on the display when in this mode.
TALK: This setting should be used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts, and books on tape. Talk makes
spoken words sound very clear.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The message
may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every
three seconds until the message is completed. Once
the completed message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on the
display, the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that
does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic will
appear on the display.
To display the last message, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume
is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
appear on the display.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on.
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the display
when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that
has traffic announcement broadcast capability.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the same category.
Activating Category (CAT) Stations
(RDS and XM™)
CAT allows you to search for stations with specific types
of music. The selectable categories are POP, EASY,
TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the box
when AF is selected on.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CATEGORY
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when CAT is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Radio Message
Once CAT is activated the categories will appear on the
display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations, if programmed. Press the firm key for the
category that you would like to listen to. Not all stations
support CAT. The radio may not go to all of the stations
with that music type when pressing the firm key.
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.
Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
No Title Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No Information
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receiver
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
Using the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on the
CD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radio
off but it will not start playing until the radio is on.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed).
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this firm key to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this firm key
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the firm key
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
F2 NEXT: Press this firm key to go to the next track.
Press and hold this firm key to advance quickly within a
track. Release the firm key to play the passage. The
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this firm key to listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play. RANDOM will disappear
from the display.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this firm key to hear a track
over again. REPEAT will appear on the display.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT will
disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display the
time of the track. Press this firm key again to remove the
time of the track from the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
Please Wait will appear on the display and you will
hear a beep.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations, if programmed.
Do not try to load two CDs at one time and wait to
load a CD until INSERT appears on the display
for each disc inserted. The CD player will take up
to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six. If
you want to load less than six CDs, load the desired
amount. The CD player will time out when it does
not receive any more CDs and the last CD
loaded will begin to play.
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to play
automatically.
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please Wait
will appear on the display.
F1 CD n (Down): Press this firm key to go to the
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the CD in.
previous CD.
F2 CD m (Up): Press this firm key to go to the next CD.
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,
the number of the CD and the track number will
appear on the display if the radio is on.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM TRK will appear on the display.
CD REV { (Reverse): Press this firm key to go to the
previous track. Press and hold this firm key to reverse
quickly within the track. Release the firm key to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
Press the MODE firm key again to turn off random
play. RDM TRK will disappear from the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ALL will appear on the display. Press
the MODE firm key again to turn off random play.
RDM ALL will disappear from the display.
CD FWD | (Forward): Press this firm key to go to
the next track. Press and hold this firm key to advance
quickly within the track. Release the firm key to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display the
time of the track. Press this firm key again to display
CD PLAY and press this firm key once more to clear
the display.
F5 MODE: Press this firm key to select from NORMAL,
RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD (Repeat CD),
RDM TRK (Random Track), and RDM ALL (Random
All CDs).
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the display
when in this mode.
to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN: Press this button to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play.
RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that is
currently playing, or press and hold this button to
eject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep.
Eject may be activated with the ignition or radio off.
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.
RPT DISC will appear on the display. Press the
MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play.
RPT DISC will disappear from the display.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
This feature allows you to customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to
make it easier to adjust the radio features and other
non-radio related features are also available for
customization.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
To program the configurable radio display keys, perform
the following steps:
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP appears
on the display.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of the
four configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature will be shown.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the configurable
key to change.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature that
you would like to store to the key.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have the DVD Rear Seat
9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have found
the feature to be stored. The display will update,
by showing the symbol of the feature that you
selected next to the configurable key.
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes
a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.
RSE is available in a base and an uplevel version.
The uplevel version is provided with the navigation
radio (if equipped). The uplevel RSE system offers the
rear seat passengers to have shared control of FM1,
FM2, AM, weather, CDC, and XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped).
10. Repeat the previous steps for each
configurable key.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature
will not appear on the display when programming
the remaining configurable keys. The configurable keys
can be changed at any time.
Before You Drive
Navigation/Radio System
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Headphones
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. To turn the
headphones OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located on the front of the DVD
player faceplate. These jacks allow audio and video
signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
The left jack is for left audio input, the right jack is
for right audio input, and the center jack is used
for video input. The system requires standard RCA
cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary device to
the RCA jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for proper usage.
The transmitters are located above the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off to save battery
power if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes. The signal may be lost if the system is
turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the
signal transmitters.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect
an external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to
the RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device
power and the power on the front of the RSE player.
To have use of these jacks, select AUX using the
MODE button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screws to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Change the Video Format when
in the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Connect to the red RCA jack.
6. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
2. Press the SRCE button on the DVD faceplate or
the remote control.
• Wired Headphones (not included)
3. Press the down arrow button to highlight the
VIDEO FORMAT option.
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is
audio available. See “Headphones” previously for
more information.
4. Press the enter button to select VIDEO FORMAT.
5. Press the right or left arrow button to select the
video format.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the radio
if the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system
is selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust
the speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the
RSE system power is not on, the RSE system will not
be an available source on the radio. Refer to the
radio information for the radio that your vehicle has
for more information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the floor console under the
display. Flip up the display to access the DVD player.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Video Screen
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country
that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code
is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The video screen is located in the floor console. Lift up
the screen by the top or the sides into the full open
position. Adjust the screen’s position as desired. When
the video screen is not in use, close the screen.
The DVD player will also play audio CDs. Not all home
recorded CDs, CD-R or CD-RW formats, will play in
this DVD player.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen
is in the closed position, the signals will not be available
for the operation of the headphones and the remote
control.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing the enter button when this menu appears on the
display will switch the RSE setting between all speaker
and rear video. All speaker will not be available if the front
passenger has turned on the parental control.
• All Speaker: The radio and the RSE unit will share
control of what is heard through the vehicle
speakers. All audio and video sources are available
for selection with the SRCE button when in all
speaker.
• Rear Video: The RSE unit will only control what is
seen on the rear display and what is heard through
the headphones.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing a DVD.
Press this button twice to return to the beginning of
the DVD.
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the
DVD player on, to start play of a DVD or CD, and to
switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
on and off.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu.
This button only operates with a DVD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to cycle through the
available video modes. Auxiliary is available when
an auxiliary device is plugged into the auxiliary jacks
on the DVD faceplate.
If your vehicle is equipped with the TV option, the menu
button will display a TV specific menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
each press of the SRCE button will cycle the rear video
between DVD, AUX, TV, and front DVD.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to modify the
video screen display characteristics.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a Disc
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation): Use the arrow
keys to navigate through a menu.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start
if the vehicle is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when RAP
is active.
r (Enter): Press this button to select items within
a menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
after pressing the SRCE button, the enter button
can select all speaker or rear video. See the SRCE
button previously for more information.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Audio/Video Jack: See “Stereo RCA Jacks” earlier in
this section for more information.
X (Headphone Jack): These jacks allow you to listen
to the RSE through wired headphones (not included).
Stopping and Resume Playback
9 (Headphone Volume): Turn the left knob to
increase the volume of the headphone connected to
the left headphone jack. Turn the right knob to increase
the volume of the headphone connected to the right
headphone jack.
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ejecting a Disc
• Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the DVD player. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the DVD player.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate
to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on
the remote control.
• No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed, the
DVD player will reload the disc within 25 to 30 seconds.
The disc will be stored in the DVD player. The DVD
player will not resume play of the disc automatically.
PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.
Parental Control Button: This button is located on the
navigation system screen. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the
audio. The video screen will display Parental Control
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will
flash. It will also disable all other button operations
from the remote control and the DVD player, with the
exception of the eject button. The driver will then be able
to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of
the DVD player.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
• Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
readable, or if the disc format is not compatible.
The disc will be automatically ejected from the
DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.
• Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed
if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
• Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player cannot play the disc. Severely
scratched or damaged discs will cause this error.
The disc will be automatically ejected from the
DVD player.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window above the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect
the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on for eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to access the multiple
titles (if available) of a DVD.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
main menu.
n (Up): Press this button to move up the menu list
of a DVD.
z (Display): Press this button to switch the video
screen display features: color, contrast, brightness, tint,
and display mode (normal, full, and zoom). Normal
means the horizontal image is not stretched and
the borders at the left and right of the picture are blank.
Full means the horizontal image is stretched across
the display and all of the vertical lines are displayed.
No borders are present. Zoom means the horizontal
image is stretched up and down the display and
the image tends to be stretched at the borders instead
of at the middle. Borders are not displayed. Press
the left or right navigation keys up or down to select
the display mode. Use the Enter key to enter and
select adjustments.
q (Down): Press this button to move down the menu
list of a DVD.
p (Left): Press this button to move to the left of the
menu list of a DVD.
o (Right): Press this button to move to the right of the
menu list of a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select items within
a menu.
e (Audio): Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and
a menu is active.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to open a menu that
will operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
| (Angle): Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop the play of a DVD
or CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
u (Next): Press this button to go to the next chapter
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD, and to
switch between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
or track of a DVD or CD.
t (Previous): Press this button to go to the previous
chapter or track of a DVD or CD.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
through the chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
r (Rewind): Press this button to rewind through the
chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric
inputs.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
To change the batteries, do the following:
No power.
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the MODE button
to switch between the
DVD player and the
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
auxiliary source.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Press the DISP button on
the DVD player or on the
remote control. Change
the display mode.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
The remote control
does not work.
Point the remote control
directly at the infrared
window below the video
screen while using.
Check that the batteries
are not dead or put
in wrong.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the signal coming
picture moves or scrolls. from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Press the MENU button
on the DVD player or on
the remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on
the DVD menu.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Press the MODE button
to change from the
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
This could be caused by
interference from cellular
telephone towers or by
using your cellular
DVD player mode to the
auxiliary source mode.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
telephone in the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Press the eject/load
DVD Distortion
button on the DVD player.
Turn the power off, then
on again, then press the
eject/load button on the
DVD player.
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS)*,
two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and the DVD player.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the DVD Player
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate. If the radio is removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to
trace the radio back to your vehicle.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button,
to turn the sound on.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), radio,
or CD.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button, until
you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or fast reverse
through the CD. Press either button again to play the
passage.
g (Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has the
navigation system, press this button to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in
the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play stations
that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Radio Reception
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track.
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AM
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to the
next or the previous radio station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations will
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go to
the start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the plus sign to go to the next track.
If either the minus or the plus button are pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of XM
signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling
it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear quarter
glass windows, located in the rear of the vehicle on
the driver and passenger sides. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear windows are not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not
be covered by your warranty.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the rear quarter window with
a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This
may affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of
victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• Judgment
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so
they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical, psychological,
and developmental reasons for these laws.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example,
it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the
United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can
on page 4-11.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep
pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 3-40. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the
rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
On an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system
will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could damage your
vehicle’s driveline.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, you
may still feel the system working. This is normal
and necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle.
This warning light will
come on to let you know
if there’s a problem
with your traction
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
control system.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button located
near the shift lever.
Magnetic Ride Control
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic
ride control is achieved through a computer used to
control and monitor the suspension system. The
controller receives input from various sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will
display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM message.
more information. See your dealer for service.
If you press the TC (traction control) button once, the
traction control system will turn off and the traction
control system warning light will come on. Press
the TC button again to turn the system back on. If you
press and hold the TC button for five seconds, the
StabiliTrak® system and the traction control system will
turn off. Press the TC (traction control) button again
to turn StabiliTrak® back on. For more information, see
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of
the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no
traction and the other does, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you
start your vehicle. To help assist you with directional
control of the vehicle, you should always leave the
system on. You can turn StabiliTrak® off if you ever need
to through the TC (traction control) on/off button. See
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists
you with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
Panic Brake Assist
When the system activates, a Stability System Engaged
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
Service Stability System message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver
to maintain brake application. When this happens the
brake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let the system work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes will return
to normal operation after the brake pedal has been
released.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels all the time. This is like
four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
on page 4-11.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have StabiliTrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center.
See “Stability System Active Message” under
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your
front wheels are straight ahead.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are
far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its
front in your inside mirror, activate your right
lane change signal and move back into the right
lane. Remember that if your right outside mirror is
convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will
be increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you to
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
cancel your pass, you need only slow down and
drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your
wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,
too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Off-roading” means you have left the North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked.
Curves are not banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have all-wheel
drive. If your vehicle does not have all-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make
it much better suited for off-road use. Its higher ground
clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off-road
obstacles. But your vehicle does not have features like
special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear
range, things that are usually thought necessary for
extended or severe off-road service.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if equipped, are properly attached.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What
are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving? If you do not know, you should
check with law enforcement people in the area. Will
you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to
get the necessary permission.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{CAUTION:
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where
permitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
• You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands
if you are not prepared.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the steepness,
do not drive the hill.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to
start spinning or sliding.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the
top of the hill.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• Use your headlamps, even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then shift
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission in
PARK (P), and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
{CAUTION:
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because, if you ignore
them, you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”
The brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have
to decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts
to roll over, you will be right in its path.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need
longer braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you
do not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and your passengers could drown.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Water
{CAUTION:
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive
through it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you
probably will not get through. Also, water that deep
can damage the axle and other vehicle parts.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the ground
from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not
drive through rushing water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your vehicle’s
ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling
can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water.
And, as long as the tailpipe is under water, you will
never be able to start the engine. When you go
through water, remember that when the brakes
get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
for more information on driving through water.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due
to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in
bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night.
But if you are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but
they also make a lot of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out
dimly lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and
even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise
to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
parking lamps — to help make you more visible
to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles
that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you
could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can
make your trips safer and more enjoyable. See
driving off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let your engine assist your
brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Winter Driving
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your
vehicle.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need
to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin
and polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause
an engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hook
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn the system
off by pressing and holding the Traction button so
that the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and
the traction off light are illuminated on the instrument
panel cluster. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hook if your vehicle has one. If you
do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-50.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a recovery hook.
The recovery hook is provided in the jack storage area.
The hook can be installed either at the front of the
vehicle on the passenger side or at the rear of
the vehicle on the driver side. At either location, remove
the access cap from the vehicle trim and screw the
hook into position. You may need to use the hook if
you are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some
place where you can continue driving.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-52 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Available
Cargo Weight =
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
United States version shown, Canada similar
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge. This label shows the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle and is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue
weight, if pulling a trailer.
Available
Cargo Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire label on
your truck or consult your dealer for additional details.
{CAUTION:
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See Off-Road Driving
on page 4-17.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-36.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and
“dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly. If you have an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)
vehicle, it can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.
To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as
the load changes. It’s automatic — you don’t need to
adjust anything.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. But trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer
weight for your vehicle.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Maximum
Package
Trailer Weight
*GCWR
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
6,853 lbs
(3 808 kg)
Base
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
4,250 lbs
9,353 lbs
V92
(1 928 kg)
(4 242 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your
vehicle should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since
the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering
capacity more than the total of the additional weight.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
But, you must still consider the effect on the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle
without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight
is about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the
900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able
to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does
not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR,
RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight.
The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any
of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay
within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would
only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further
and think you must limit tongue weight to less than
1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop
to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer
brakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work
well, or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33. Dirt and water can, too.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will
also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t
shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive
belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review this information before you start your trip.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you may choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies
your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of
the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced,
and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane
is less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking noise
when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise,
you might damage your engine. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 5-6 for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-42. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap
is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, press on the rear edge of the
fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap
is not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp
to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of the grille near the
center. Move the release lever to the side and
raise the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever with this symbol on it.
It is located inside the vehicle on the lower left side
of the instrument panel.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-97.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, you will see the following:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-97.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Your vehicle may have
an oil pressure light on
the instrument cluster.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
There is also an Oil Pressure Low — Stop Engine
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the light and/or message appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you need to check your engine oil level
right away. For more information, see “Oil Pressure
Low — Stop Engine” under DIC Warnings and
page 3-45.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
V6 Engine
V8 Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For V6 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
For V8 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. You should look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards
are all you will need for good performance and
engine protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer has GM-trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
After the oil has been changed, the Change Engine Oil
message and the oil life indicator must be reset.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A Change Engine Oil message in the
DIC will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system may not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
Change Engine Oil Message in the DIC being turned on,
reset the system.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Base Audio System
What to Do with Used Oil
Press the CLR button located to the right of the
DIC display to acknowledge the Change Engine Oil
message. This will clear the message from the
display and reset it.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
To reset the oil life indicator, use the following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the oil life
indicator will be reset.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the Change Engine Oil message comes back on
when you start your vehicle or the percentage does not
return to 100, the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
Navigation System
If you have the navigation system, see “Vehicle
Customization” in the SRX Navigation System Owner
Supplement for how to reset the oil life indicator.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of
the cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is not
going across the top of the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the
passenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
on page 6-14 for the correct part number for
the filter.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
{CAUTION:
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation System
How to Reset the Change Transmission
Fluid Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator
If your vehicle has a navigation system, see your
navigation system supplement for instructions on how
to reset the transmission fluid life indicator.
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission fluid
life indicator must be reset. To reset the message
and indicator, use one of the following procedures:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Base Audio System
Press the CLR (Clear) button located to the right of the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display to acknowledge
the CHANGE TRANS FLUID message. This will
clear the message from the display and reset it.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-29.
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use the
following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO
(Information) button located to the right of the
DIC display to access the DIC menu.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu item
is highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the
transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not
return to 100.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you do not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives in
your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the
side to the horizontal mark.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
If the Check Coolant Level message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See
more information.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
There are three engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
for more information.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a Check Coolant Level
message, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no Check
Coolant Level message, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let
the engine idle.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss
in power and engine performance. A low coolant and/or
engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat
setting and fan speed and open the windows,
as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine driven
fan, as well as the electric pusher fans (A) which are
located behind the vehicle’s grille.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn
and then stop.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out
of the radiator, on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the
Check Coolant Level message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center, the coolant is at the proper
fill level. If a Check Coolant Level message does
appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure
cap, or see your GM dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid
page 3-57 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your
brake system checked
to see if there is a leak.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Brake Pedal Travel
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
{CAUTION:
Replacing Brake System Parts
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery
Jump Starting
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
page 5-12 for battery location.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle,
as well as the positive (+) terminal location on
your vehicle’s battery. See Engine Compartment
location of the battery.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the ECM,
ECM mounting bracket, or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.
Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle’s
remote negative ground location, instead of the
ECM, ECM bracket, or any cables attached to the
ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located
between the battery and the underhood fuse block.
You should always use this remote ground
location, instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your
vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there
is an additional system that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position.
The driver’s side blade will be straight up and
down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down far enough to release it from the
J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the rear wiper blade follow the steps
listed previously.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Tires
Tire Sidewall Labelling
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 5-66
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type
on all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V,
W and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter
tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the
tire’s maximum speed capability.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings
on the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they are cold. The recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-86.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can
be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. If your vehicle has this
feature, sensors are mounted on each tire and wheel
assembly, except for the compact spare tire and wheel.
Tire pressure readings are sent to a receiver located
in the vehicle once every 60 seconds while the vehicle is
being driven, and once every 60 minutes if the vehicle
is stationary for more than 15 minutes.
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set
the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire pressure
levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM system
will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the DIC and, at the same time, illuminate
the low tire pressure warning symbol, on the instrument
panel cluster.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The Tire and Loading Information Label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and their recommended
cold inflation pressures. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45, for the location of the tire and loading
information label. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
When the low tire pressure
telltale is illuminated, one
or more of your tires is
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle
has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
significantly under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn chirp
will sound, indicating that the TPM system is ready,
and the sensor matching process can begin.
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you replace one or more of the TPM sensors,
the identification codes will need to be matched to the
new tire/wheel position. Each tire/wheel position is
matched, to a sensor, by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. The sensors are matched, to the
tire/wheel positions, in the following order: left front (LF),
right front (RF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR).
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
one minute, to match the first tire and wheel, or more
than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel
positions the matching process stops and you will
need to start over.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
1. Set the parking brake.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. After hearing the confirming double horn chirp,
for the left rear tire, exit the matching process
by turning the ignition switch to OFF.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed
on the DIC screen. This message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the TPM
sensor. The Service Tire Monitor message is also
displayed when the TPM system is malfunctioning.
One or more missing or inoperable TPM sensors will
cause the service tire monitor message to be displayed.
See your GM dealer for service.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual
wear and damage. Also see, Scheduled Maintenance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
page 5-54 for additional information.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W and ZR
speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with a lower
speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum speed
capability.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed on
your vehicle), brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your vehicle’s
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could
be injured. Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly
as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
information.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the rear
of the vehicle. To access the equipment, do the
following:
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
page 5-86 for more information about the compact spare.
1. Remove the storage bin to access the jack if your
vehicle has the cargo management system.
If your vehicle has the third row seat, remove the
head rest storage tray to access the jack.
To remove the spare tire from the vehicle, do the
following:
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Cable
C. Retainer
D. Compact Spare Tire
for more information.
2. Open the storage compartment door of the cargo
management system that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the container.
2. Turn the wing nut (A) holding the jack (B)
(and storage tray, if applicable) counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (A) into the hoist shaft.
3. Remove the jack and wheel wrench (C).
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire (D) can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch
may be engaged causing the tire not to lower.
Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if
the cable is visible.
If it is not visible,
see Secondary Latch
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
over-tighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable then by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at
least two times, if the spare tire has not lowered.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 4 under Removing the Spare Tire
5. Tilt the retainer (C) and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the cable (B).
6. Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel two slips
or hear two clicks after removing the spare tire to
raise the cable back up.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Find the jacking
location using the
hoisting notches
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
located in the plastic
molding. The notches
in the plastic molding
are marked with a
triangle shape to help
you find them.
To remove the flat tire and install the spare, do the
following:
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack
you could be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them
yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for each turn.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into
the metal flange located behind the triangle on
the plastic molding as shown.
Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle.
When raising your vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the frame and avoid
contact with the plastic molding.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all the
wheel nuts and
take off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
10. Install the spare tire.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover securely
in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare
tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
{CAUTION:
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at
Step 3.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
2. If the cable is visible,
turn the wrench
counterclockwise
until approximately
6 inches (15 cm)
of cable is exposed.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise
the jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the
jack under the center of the spare tire.
8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out
from under the vehicle.
9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel
wrench and jack.
10. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening when the spare tire has been completely
lowered.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
11. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up if the cable is hanging.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets
you know that the secondary latch has released.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
3. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in an upright position against the third row seat.
Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row
Passengers
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
5. Tighten the tie-down strap.
2. Use the power third row seat button, near the
liftgate, to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Flat Tire with a
Flat Load Floor
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
upwards, its secondary latch won’t work
properly and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened
when your vehicle was being driven, the tire
might contact a person or another vehicle,
causing injury and, of course, damage to itself
as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare
tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down.
To store the spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare
tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in a horizontal position on the floor in the rear
of the vehicle.
3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
4. Tighten the tie-down strap.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until you
feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through
the center hole of the spare tire.
Makesure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the
spare tire.
6. When the tire is almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so that the valve stem is towards
the rear of the vehicle.
8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn the tire (B). If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
This will help when you check and maintain
tire pressure in the spare.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation
monitor system, if your vehicle has this feature, after
installing or removing the compact spare. See Tire
may not work correctly when the compact spare is
installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace
the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s
interior may experience extremes of heat that could
cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle’s
glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain
a product from your GM dealer to remove odors from
your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water
or club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-90.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners
on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches, and
other light surface
contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Concentrate
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels
and wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Removes dust,
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
fingerprints, and
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
surface contaminants.
Spray on and wipe off.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
You will find this label in the passenger side rear
storage compartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Electrical System
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse blows, see your dealer for
service immediately.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t
have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the
same amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one located
in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
and the other two under the rear seat.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
Relays
Usage
LO SPEED
FAN
RELAY MINI
Low Speed Fan Motor
HI SPEED FAN
RELAY MINI
High Speed Fan Motor
Accessory Power
ACCESSORY
RELAY MINI
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
Series/Parallel Fan
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Compressor Clutch
PARK LAMP
RELAY MICRO
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
Parking Lamps
Horn
HORN RELAY
MICRO
IGN-1 RELAY
MICRO
Ignition Switch (ON)
HI BEAM
High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Wiring
RELAY MICRO
Harnesses
Usage
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT
BODY W/H
I/P W/H
Wiring Harness Connection
Wiring Harness Connection
Engine Wiring Harness Connection
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
Low-Beam HID Headlamps (Option)
Headlamp Washer Motor (Option)
ENG W/H
FORWARD
LAMP
Forward Lamp Wiring Harness
Connection
HDLP WASH
RELAY
MINI-OPT
J Cases
Usage
SPARE
Not Used
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
R REAR
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
Front Blower
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
R REAR
L REAR
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
RELAY MICRO
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
MAIN RELAY Powertrain/Engine Control
MICRO
Module (ECM)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
L REAR
HI FAN
STARTER
RELAY MINI
Starter Solenoid
High Cooling Fan Motor
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J Cases
LOW FAN
BLOWER
STARTER
EBCM
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Low Cooling Fan Motor
PWM Fan Motor Assembly
Starter Solenoid
Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
LT PARK
Rear License Plate Assembly,
DIM (Dash Integration Module)
LIC/DIMMING
DIM/ALDL
Electronic Brake Control Module
DIM, ALDL (Assembly Line
Data Link)
Fuses
RT PARK
HORN
Usage
FLASHER
V8 ECM
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
V8 ECM, Canister Purge
Passenger’s Side Taillamp
Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
Front Parking Lamp Assembly
Steering Wheel Control Pad,
Headlamp Switch
STRG CTLS
Dual Horn Assembly
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
STARTER RLY Jumper to Starter Relay
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
WASH NOZ
Heated Washer Nozzles
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM
Headlamp
Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,
ODD COILS
Odd Injection Coils
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
RT HI BEAM
Headlamp
TCM, ECM and IPC (Instrument
Panel Cluster)
TCM/IPC
High Feature V6 ECM (Electronic
Control Module)
HFV6 ECM
SPARE
ABS
Not Used
REAR WPR
THEFT
Rear Wiper Motor
Anti-lock Brake System
ECM, TCM (Transmission Control
Module), PASS-Key® III+ Module
Vehicle Information and
Communication System
VICS
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
EVEN COILS Even Injection Coils
Instrument Panel Accessory
I/P OUTLET
CCP
Power Outlet
Ignition Switch (Power to IGN-3
and CRANK)
IGN SW
Climate Control
VOLT CHECK DIM
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Oxygen Sensors, CAM Phaser
PREO2/CAM
ECM, TCM, IPC,
ECM/TCM
PASS-Key® III+ Module
Windshield Wiper Module Assembly
Post O2 Sensors
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
WPR MOD
POSTO2
COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch
Circuit
Breakers
WPR SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Usage
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
Headlamp Washer Motor (Optional)
Center Console Accessory
Power Outlet
OUTLET
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver Side)
Relays
Usage
BASS RELAY
MICRO
Brake Lamps
Not Used
SPARE
ELC RELAY
MINI
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor Motor
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under the
rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The carpet
must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.
SPARE
Not Used
L POSITION
RELAY MICRO
Driver’s Side Position Lamp
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
R POSITION
RELAY MICRO
Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
IGN 3 RELAY Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
MICRO
Motor, Shifter Assembly
STANDING
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Control for Position Lamp Relays
SPARE
Not Used
REV LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
L FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
DRIVER
DR MOD
Driver’s Heated Seat Module
Driver’s Door Module
MEM/ADAPT Driver’s Power Seat Switch,
Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp, Flasher Module,
ABS Module, Trailer Lamps
SEAT
Memory Seat Module
BASS
Universal Garage Door Opener,
Intrusion Sensor, Diversity
Antenna Module
THEFT
HDLP
LEVELING
Headlamp Leveling System
Chassis Sensors (Export Only)
REVERSE
LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
License Plate Lamp Assembly
SPARE
CCP
Not Used
Climate Control Panel (CCP)
SPARE
Not Used
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
IGN 3
POSITION
LAMP
Taillamp Assemblies,
Front Position Lamp Assemblies
J Cases
Usage
SPARE
Not Used
AMP
Audio Amplifier
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor, Electronic Level
Control (ELC) Solenoid
Radio, OnStar® Module
ELC COMP
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Compressor
ELC
AUDIO
Circuit
FFS SW
Flip Fold Seat Switch
Breakers
Usage
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
FFSM Flip Fold Seat Module
Power Seat Switches,
Memory Seat Module
SEAT C/B
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger Side)
Relays
Usage
PRIMARY
QUARTER A/C Rear Air Conditioning
RELAY MINI
SPARE
Not Used
REAR DEFOG
RELAY MINI
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear
fuse block.
Rear Window Defogger
Not Used
SPARE
AFTERBOIL
RELAY MICRO
Afterboil Pump
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
INT LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
IGN 1 RELAY
Ignition Switch
MICRO
SPARE
Not Used
Sunroof
RAP RELAY
(MICRO)
FUEL PUMP
MOTOR
RLY MICRO
Fuel Pump Motor
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
INTERIOR
LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
R FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
Passenger’s Side Heated
Seat Module
RT
REAR HATCH Rear Hatch Latch
Passenger’s Door Module
FRT DR MOD
AIR BAG
Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM)
Rear Integration Module (RIM),
Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder
RIM
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
Shifter, Power Sounder, Rear
IGN 1
REAR FOG
LAMP
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
Suspension Module
Parking Aid, Rearview Mirror, RIM
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
SUSPNTN
VICS/RAP
SPARE
TV Tuner Assembly, Vehicle
Information Communication
System (VICS) Module, Sunroof
J Cases
Usage
Not Used
SUNROOF MOD Power Sunroof Module
POWER
POWER
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
Afterboil Heater Pump
Canister Vent Solenoid
Power Liftgate
LIFTGATE
SOUNDER
AFTERBOIL
Circuit
Breakers
CANISTER
VENT
Usage
DR MOD
PWR C/B
Door Modules
FUEL
PUMP MTR
Fuel Pump Motor
REAR HVAC Rear Climate Control System
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Automatic Transmission
Cooling System
3.6L V6
9.5 qt
9.0 L
11.7 qt
12.5 qt
11.1 L
11.8 L
4.6L V8
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6
6.0 qt
8.0 qt
5.7 L
7.6 L
4.6L V8
Fuel Tank
20.0 gal
100 lb ft
75.7 L
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
3.6L V6 (LY7)
4.6L V8 (LH2)
7
A
Automatic
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
on page 5-5.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset.
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
on page 5-24.
•
•
•
For vehicles used for trailer towing:
Change transfer case fluid.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
•
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges, rear
compartment hinges, and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-26 for further details.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-29.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(V8 Engine) with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should
look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
For the proper viscosity, see
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine,
Engine Oil
(V6 Engine)
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-26.
Coolant
Hydraulic
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Brake System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
Washer
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Power
Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Folding Seats, in Canada 10953474).
and Fuel
DEXRON®-III Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Look for “Approved for the
H-Specification” on the label.
Automatic
Transmission
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Points
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No.
U.S. 12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Front and
Rear Axle
DEXRON®-III Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case Fluid. Look for “Approved for the
H-Specification” on the label.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Numbers
Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6
25728874
A2029C
25177917
89017342
25740404
PF2129
PF61
4.6L V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF133
3.6L V6
12597464
12571533
41-990
41-986
4.6L V8
Windshield Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm)
Rear Wiper Blade- 13 inches (33.0 cm)
12367281
88892785
25759094
8-2221
8-2211
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps
One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line
Program to enforce any additional rights you may have.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet for information on the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
Customer Assistance Offices
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States — Customer Assistance
Canada — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
From Puerto Rico:
Overseas — Customer Assistance
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any situation
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only
in the United States and Canada.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Reaching Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will
assist you and request the following information:
• A description of the problem
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Towing Service
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• The model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired.
Cadillac has installed special telecommunication
devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside
Service Center.
Roadside Service Availability
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer
technician, if available, can travel to your location within
a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available,
for up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel
angle, and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions
for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate
repair of detected malfunctions; other information
is stored only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called event data
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision.
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of
the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may
be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Collision Damage Repair
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repair Facility
If an Accident Occurs
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident.
This will help guard against post-accident legal
action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will
notify us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications
for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors
cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-82
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks (cont.)
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire (cont.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-62
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-33
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
